English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PREPARATIONS 13
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . 28
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 32
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
PLAYBACK 46
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
En 3
Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Preparing the DAB tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Displaying the DAB information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
CONFIGURATIONS 95
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 118
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 120
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
En 4
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
APPENDIX 125
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-AS710.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
DAB radio (RX-AS710D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna (RX-AS710) FM antenna (RX-AS710)
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
DAB/FM antenna (RX-AS710D) YPAO microphone
Power cable
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-AS710 (Europe
model), unless otherwise specified.
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.141
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.47
Supports 2- to 7.1-channel speaker system. Allows
you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in
various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.32
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.49
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.53
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(multi-zone)
. p.82
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
•Bluetooth
. p.66
• iPod/iPhone
. p.67
•USB
. p.70
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.73
• Internet radio
. p.77
•AirPlay
. p.80
4K Ultra HD signals and
HDCP 2.2 supported
Control
En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.23)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.22)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑
Various wireless connection methods (p.37)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.49)
Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a
natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers
are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field even when no surround back
speakers are connected.
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.51)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
❑ Low power consumption (p.117)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct
VSBS
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.108).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.112).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.94).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.31).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware (p.123). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.124).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.95)
• SCENE settings (p.98)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.100)
• Various function settings (p.103)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.119)
• System settings (p.120)
En 8
Useful applications
■ AV CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into
a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)
• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you
with cable connections between AV receiver and source
devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application
guides you through the various settings such as
speaker connections, TV and video/audio device
connections and selecting the speaker system.
Functions
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio
devices)
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup
assistance with illustrations)
• Viewing owner’s manual
• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En 9
Front panel
1 ZONE key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85).
2 INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.40).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
4 Front display
Displays information (p.10).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.53).
6 INPUT knob
Select an input source.
7 z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
8 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.111)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.112)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.113)
• An iPod is being charged (p.67)
9 PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
0 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.32).
A STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.52).
B PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.48).
C SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.47).
D AUX (AUDIO) jack
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players
(p.26).
E USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod
(p.67).
F VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFO (WPS)
PURE DIRECT
V
O
L
U
M
E
ZONE
INPUT
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
(
CONNECT
)
BD/DVD
TV NET RADIO
AUX
SCENE
AUDI O
PROGRA
M
5V
1A
23 4 51
6
F9
7 D E: AB8C
(RX-AS710 Europe model)
En 10
Front display (indicators)
1 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.117).
2 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
3 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53) is
working.
4 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49) is
working.
5 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal (RX-AS710) or an FM radio station (RX-AS710D)
signal.
6 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.37).
7 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device
(p.66).
8 PA RT Y
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.86)
9 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
0 ZONE2
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.85).
A MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
B Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
C VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.49), or the virtual
surround processing (p.51) is working.
D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
E Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.91).
F ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.93) is working.
G Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
E
Presence speaker (L)
R
Presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
L C R
FPRFPL
SL
SBL SBRSB
SW
SR
VOL.
MUTE
ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
ENHANCER
TUNEDSTEREO
2
SLEEP
PARTY
ZONE
OUT
2 C34 87 9 A1 :6B5
D DE
F G
En 11
Rear panel
1 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.26).
2 TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.29).
3 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting
video/audio signals (p.22). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
4 HDMI 1–6 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).
5 Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.37).
6 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.28).
7 AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.30).
8 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).
9 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.26).
0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.84).
A ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.27).
B ZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.83).
C SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.19).
D SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.18).
E VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.30).
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
FM
REMOTE
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
AC IN
SPEAKERS
WIRELESS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
PR PB Y
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2 51 3 74
6
9
BC
D8 :A E
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(RX-AS710 Europe model)
En 12
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–6 HDMI 1–6 jacks
AUX AUX jack (on the front panel)
AV 1–4 AV 1–4 jacks
AUDIO AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select
“AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”)
TUNER FM/AM radio (RX-AS710), DAB/FM radio
(RX-AS710D)
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)
PHONO PHONO jacks
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.85).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.47).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.48).
7 External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback
device (p.141).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.69).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source (p.54, p.58).
BAND Switches between FM and AM radio
(RX-AS710), or DAB and FM (RX-AS710D).
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.141).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.48).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.55, p.59,
p.63).
F HDMI OUT key
Enables/disables video/audio output from the HDMI OUT
jack (p.46).
G PA RTY k e y
Turns on/off the party mode (p.86).
H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
J OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.92).
K DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.91).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
G
I
F
J
K
1
3
2
5
4
6
H
7
E
D
8
A
B
:
C
9
En 13
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.14)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.18)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.22)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.23)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the radio antennas (p.27)
Connect the supplied radio antennas to the unit.
6
Connecting a network cable or preparing
the wireless antenna (p.28)
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for
establishing a wireless network connection.
7 Connecting other devices (p.29)
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.30)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.31)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.32)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
11
Connecting to a network device wirelessly
(p.37)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless
connection.
En 14
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
If you use five speakers in the front side, use two of them as front surround speakers (*1) or presence speakers (*2). We recommend using them as front surround speakers for
enjoying unprocessed playback (p.52) or presence speakers for enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (p.49).
• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.135).
• If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers.
To reinforce the rear left/right sounds, use them as surround back speakers.
To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers.
• Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.17).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1
Front
5.1
4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
●●●● ● ●●●
Front (R) 2 ●●●● ● ●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●●● ● ●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel
sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
●●●●
c*
1
●
Surround (R) 5 ●●●●
c*
1
●
Surround back (L) 6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
●
Surround back (R) 7 ●
Surround back 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●
Presence (L) E
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49), the presence speakers
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room.
●
c*
2
Presence (R) R ●
c*
2
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
●●●● ● ●●●
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 15
7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
7.1-channel system (using presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
6.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker.
5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround
Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound
field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
45
1
2
39
67
45
1
2
39
ER
45
1
2
39
8
45
12
39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 16
Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
Front 5.1-channel system (using presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
4.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
45
12
39
1
2
39
ER
45
12
9
12
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 17
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
z (power)
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.8MIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 18
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1-
and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
7.1-channel system
(using surround back speakers)
7.1-channel system
(using presence speakers)
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
2
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
M
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
1
67
2
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
2
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
M
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
12
3
45
9
ER
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 19
6.1-channel system
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(Canada, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
2
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
M
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
12
3
45
9
8
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it
to the SINGLE jack (L side).
The unit (rear)
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
Audio pin cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 20
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE/SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.105) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• The FRONT jacks and ZONE2/F.PRESENCE/SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP jacks output the same signals.
12
3
45
9
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
2
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
M
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp
connections.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 21
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI 1 (BD/DVD)
HDMI cable
Component video cable
Video pin cable
OPTICAL (TV)
AUDIO 1
Digital optical cable
COAXIAL
AV 2
Digital coaxial cable
AV 3
Stereo pin cable
AUDIO
Stereo mini-plug cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 22
Connect a TV to the unit by using HDMI cable, so that video input to the unit can be
output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.141).
3 Connecting a TV
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP
(
BD/DVD
)
REMO
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
PR PB Y
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 23
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.67)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.70)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–6, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• If your video device supports HDCP 2.2, connect the device to the HDMI 1–3 jacks.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
FM
REMOTE
AV
3
AV
4
ONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
ONO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
R PB Y
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–6 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
ZONE
O
ZON
E
PR PB Y
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AV
1
AV
2
COAXIAL
YPBPR
CONPONENT VIDEO
O
O
C
C
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 24
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (stereo
pin cable).
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–4, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 4 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
• If the video output from the video device is something other than 480i/576i, please set the video output to
480i/576i, or connect the video device directly to the TV with a component cable.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video Analog stereo AV 3-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
HD
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDC
(
BD/DVD
)
REM
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
PR PB Y
R
L
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
R
L
R
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–4 (VIDEO)
jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
AV 3-4 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–6
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–6
AV 2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–6 AV 3-4 (AUDIO)
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
AV 3-4 (AUDIO)
HDMI
2
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.
2
(
BD/DVD
)
REMOT
E
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
PR PB Y
AV 4
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 4 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 25
• The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be
used) and press the cursor key (q).
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys to select “AV4” (audio input jack to be used).
8
Press ON SCREEN.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLAY
RETURN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
NET
PHONO
BLUETOOTH
USB
AV
5 6
AUX
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
N
HONO
BLUETOOT
H
US
B
AV
5
6
AUX
1
AUDI
O
TUNER
3
4
ON SCREEN
ENTER
AV 2
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 26
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–2 or PHONO, the audio
played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable
audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on
the device will be output from the unit.
• You need to prepare an audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.67) or
“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.70).
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial
AV 2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 3-4 (AUDIO)
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 H
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
FM
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWO
PRE O
PR PB Y
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
PHONO
GND
C
L
R
L
R
O
O
L
R
L
R
C
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–4 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks
Audio output (PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
AUX
AUDI O
The unit (front)
AUX (AUDIO) jack
Portable audio
player
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 27
■ FM/AM antennas (RX-AS710)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
■ DAB/FM antenna (RX-AS710D)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
5 Connecting the radio antennas
CENTER FRONT
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
FM
REMOTE
WIRELESS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AV
1
AV
2
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER
P
R
P
B
Y
AM antennaFM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
CENTER FRONT
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
FM
REMOTE
WIRELESS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PR PB Y
75
ANTENNA
(RADIO
)
DAB/FM
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 28
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.113).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing the wireless antenna
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.37).
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
WIRELESS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 29
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a
monaural mini-plug cable.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.
7 Connecting other devices
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
GND
O
PHONO
P
R
P
B
Y
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT jack
System
connector
jack
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 30
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
EXTRA SP
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
URROUND BACK / BI-AMP
AC IN
SPEAKERS
220V
-
240V
110V
-
120V
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
EXTRA SP
FRONT
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
AC IN
SPEAKERS
RK
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 31
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 32
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
• If you want to use the presence speakers for 7.1-channel system (using
presence speakers) (p.15), set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup”
menu to "Presence" before starting YPAO.
• If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before
starting YPAO.
• If you want to use the surround speakers for the front 5.1-channel system
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.16), set “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the
“Setup” menu to “Front”.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
RETURN
ENTER
z
En 33
The following screen appears on the TV.
This completes the preparations.
5
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.35) or “Warning messages” (p.36).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.34).
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
7
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
8
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.93) in the
“Option” menu.
9
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 34
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.102).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 35
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 36
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.34) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.34) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft)
of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 37
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.38).
• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.28) or Wireless Direct (p.44).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.44).
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.28) or the
wireless network connection (p.38).
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
– Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 38
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.38)
B (p.40)
Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?
C (p.41)
No
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 39
9
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless
router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)
1
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.
2
Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).
Wireless (WAC)
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS
device to the unit using a wireless connection. For
details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)
USB Cable
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS
device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see
“Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 40
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.
1
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.
3
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
NET RADIO
AUX
N
E
AUDIO
5V
2.1A
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 41
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.38).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for
an access point. For details on settings, see
“Searching for an access point” (p.42).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually. For
details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.42).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point).
The method is available if the wireless router (access
point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details
on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.43).
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 42
❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 43
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 44
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 45
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
Otherwise, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.
10
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
12
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 46
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) (p.54)
• Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) (p.58)
• Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) (p.62)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66)
• Playing back iPod music (p.67)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.73)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.77)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu (p.93).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
Basic playback procedure
HDMI OUT 1 Output the signals at the HDMI OUT jack.
HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jack.
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
HDMI OUT 1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
PH
O
N
O
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 47
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just
one touch.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.46)
• Select a sound program (p.48)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.97).
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE
Input HDMI 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Sound
program
MOVIE
(Sci-Fi)
STRAIGHT
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo)
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo)
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
Off On On On
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
SET Complete
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
SCENE
En 48
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.49).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.50).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.52).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.52).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.53).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.53).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.99).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.52) is automatically selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.118).
Selecting the sound mode
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
INF
O
S
LEE
P
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
En 49
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound
fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence
Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
Hall in Vienna
FPRFPL
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
En 50
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.51) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 51
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.16) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
En 52
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.51) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.100).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.136).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
STRAIGHT
bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
†‡PLƒx MOVIE
SBL SBR
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
En 53
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.94) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
PURE DIRECT
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Enhancer On
ENHANCER
“ENHANCER” lights up
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
En 54
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710)
z (power)
PROGRAMSTRAIGHT
TUFM50/AM9
VOL.
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
PRE
S
ET
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 55
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.57).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.54)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.57).
VOL.
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
Preset number
VOL.
02:Empty
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
VOL.
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MEMORY
ENT
TUNING
PRESET
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 56
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.57).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SBL SBR
Information
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SBL SBR
Traffic information station (frequency)
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
TP FM101.30MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SBL SBR
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
INFO
PRESET
Numeric keys
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 57
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.56), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
2
3
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 58
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer
sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The
unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that
allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which
has a more efficient transmission method.
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently
being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB
frequencies, check WorldDMB online at
http://www.worlddab.org/.
• For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas”
(p.27).
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below
to perform an initial scan.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you
have not performed an initial scan yet.
3
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes
into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.61).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.59) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the
initial scan.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio
station.
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D)
VOL.
[ENTER] to Start
>>>-------30%
VOL.
BBCRadio4
VOL.
SBL SBR
DailyService
VOL.
SBL SBR
BBCNational
VOL.
SBL SBR
Secondary station
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
PRE
S
ET
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
TUNING
ENTER
BAND
TUNER
En 59
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.94) in the “Option” menu.
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you
have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting
their preset numbers.
• You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.58) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset
number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset
number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB
radio station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65).
01:BBCRadio4
VOL.
SBL SBR
Preset number
02:Empty
VOL.
SBL SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
Preset:01
VOL.
SBL SBR
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PRESET
BAND
MEMORY
TUNER
En 60
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is
tuned into a DAB radio station.
1
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB
radio station.
Service Label Station name
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label Ensemble name
Program Type Station genre
Date And Time Current date and time
Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
ProgramType
VOL.
SBL SBR
Item name
ClassicMusic
VOL.
SBL SBR
Information
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
INFO
En 61
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label
(0 [none] to 100 [best]).
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3
Press OPTION.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
channel label.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
<
5ALevel:80>
VOL.
SBL SBR
DAB channel label Reception strength
Frequency
Channel
label
Frequency
Channel
label
174.928 MHz 5A 208.064 MHz 9D
176.640 MHz 5B 209.936 MHz 10A
178.352 MHz 5C 211.648 MHz 10B
180.064 MHz 5D 213.360 MHz 10C
181.936 MHz 6A 215.072 MHz 10D
183.648 MHz 6B 216.928 MHz 11A
185.360 MHz 6C 218.640 MHz 11B
187.072 MHz 6D 220.352 MHz 11C
188.928 MHz 7A 222.064 MHz 11D
190.640 MHz 7B 223.936 MHz 12A
192.352 MHz 7C 225.648 MHz 12B
194.064 MHz 7D 227.360 MHz 12C
195.936 MHz 8A 229.072 MHz 12D
197.648 MHz 8B 230.784 MHz 13A
199.360 MHz 8C 232.496 MHz 13B
201.072 MHz 8D 234.208 MHz 13C
202.928 MHz 9A 235.776 MHz 13D
204.640 MHz 9B 237.488 MHz 13E
206.352 MHz 9C 239.200 MHz 13F
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
C
T
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
OPTION
ENTER
BAND
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 62
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the
DAB/FM antenna.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select the FM band.
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D)
VOL.
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
PRE
S
ET
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 63
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you
have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting
their preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.65).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.62)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select the FM band.
3
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65).
VOL.
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
Preset number
VOL.
02:Empty
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
VOL.
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MEMORY
ENT
TUNING
PRESET
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 64
Radio Data System tuning
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.65).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
Item name
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
Program Type
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SBL SBR
Information
MUTE
ENHANCER
SLEEP
OUT
ECO
CHARGE
ADAPTIVE DRC
VIRTUAL
CLASSICS
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SBL SBR
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
EN
T
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
TU
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
M
U
T
E
PR
OG
RAM
VO
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
US
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
HDMI
A
V
5
6
A
U
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
INFO
En 65
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (DAB/FM) and frequency.
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.56), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo radio signal is received.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
2
3
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 66
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.138).
Playing back
Bluetooth
device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
Playing back music via Bluetooth
The unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
BLUETOOTH
External device
operation keys
En 67
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see
“Supported devices and file formats” (p.138)
.
• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the
unit, use AirPlay (p.80).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.69).
Playing back iPod music
NET RADIO
AUX
N
E
AUDIO
5V
1A
The unit (front)
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Connected
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
En 68
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
External device
operation keys
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 69
■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself to start playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 70
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• For details on playable file formats, see
“Supported devices and file formats” (p.138)
.
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
AIGHT
N
NECT
)
BD/DVD
TV NET RADIO
AUX
SCENE
AUDIO
PROGRA
M
5V
1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Connected
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
En 71
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 72
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 73
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.28). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.119) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 74
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 75
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97).
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 76
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 77
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.28). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87).
Listening to Internet radio
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 78
■ Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Bookmark On
Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder
(p.79).
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 79
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.119) in the
“Information” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
❤
+) next to the station name.
• To remove the station from the “My__Favorites” folder, select
“My__Favorites” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (
❤
–)
next to the station name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 80
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.119) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.90).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Playing back music with AirPlay
PC
iTunes
iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
Router
(wired or wireless)
The unit
(wired or wireless)
iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
En 81
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.97) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
Menu Function
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 82
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
• Analog audio sources (including radio), and Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to Zone2.
To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks
(AV 3–4 jacks) of the unit. The party mode (p.86) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main
zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Living room (Main zone)
Study room (Zone2)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
En 83
■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105)
in the “Setup” menu to "5ch +1ZONE" after connecting the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
• When using the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, you cannot use the front presence speakers, the
surround back speakers or the bi-amp function.
■ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a
stereo pin cable.
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
2
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
M
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 1
D
MI OUT
ARC
H
DCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
ANTE
N
(
RADI
O
FM
REMOTE
AV
3
AV
4
P
ONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUB
W
P
R
PB Y
AUDIO
12
3
45
76
9
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
En 84
■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control
supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HD
P2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
FM
REMOTE
AV
4
75
IN
OUT
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
En 85
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the
front display.
3
Use the following keys to select an input source.
AV 3–4: AV 3–4 (AUDIO) jacks
TUNER: FM/AM radio (RX-AS710), DAB/FM radio
(RX-AS710D)
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a
Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
AUX: AUX (AUDIO) jack (on the front panel)
PHONO: PHONO jacks
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) (p.54)
• Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) (p.58)
• Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) (p.62)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66)
• Playing back iPod music (p.67)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.70)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.73)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.77)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
or web control (p.88) to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the
unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume
control on it.
• The Zone 2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone 2
input with the web control (p.88) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2
input or use the party mode (p.86).
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
AV 3–4
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
AUX
PHONO
MAIN/ZONE2
z
En 86
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Pres s PA RTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.115) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PARTY
En 87
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations.
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
■ Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Press MEMORY.
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2.
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
■ Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
2
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a
shortcut.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not
connected to the unit.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not
connected to the network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
–A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,
the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
Useful functions
VOL.
01:Empty
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
Shortcut number (flashes)
VOL.
02:Empty
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
VOL.
01:Empty
STEREO
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
TUNED
01:Empty
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PRESET
MEMORY
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Numeric keys
En 88
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.90) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x
1
Start the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.90) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.
• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.113), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.
• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.
– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8).
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
Web browser
Web control
PC
Router
The unit
Web control
(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)
En 89
■ Top menu screen
1 CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
2 STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
3 SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
4 PA RT Y M O DE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.86).
5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
6 MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
■ Control screen
1 PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2 TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 SCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
4 POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5 VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
6 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
2
1
4
3
5
6
En 90
■ Settings screen
1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.114) or the name of each zone
(p.115). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.112) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.113). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.80). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.113) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.113).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
2
1
3
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
En 91
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–6
AUX
AV 1–4
AUDIO 1–2
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER (AM/FM)
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit
is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.56).
TUNER (DAB)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.60) for
details.
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
Audio Decoder
SBL SBR
Item name
L C R
SL SW SR
VOL.
†‡PLƒx MOVIE
SBL SBR
Information
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
PHONO
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
RETURN
ENTE
R
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
INFO
DISPLAY
En 92
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
L C R
SL
SBL SBR
SW SR
VOL.
Tone Control
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
93
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 93
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
93
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 93
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 93
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 94
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 94
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 94
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
94
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 94
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.
94
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
94
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
(RX-AS710D only)
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
58
Tune Aid
(Tune Aid)
(RX-AS710D only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel
label.
61
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(RX-AS710 U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information station.
56
En 93
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass
(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.32).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0
to 3
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.49) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.69),
USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.69),
USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76).
—
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
Item Function Page
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
En 94
Setting range
0
to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53).
Settings
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
On (On) Enables Extra Bass.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Ideal position
Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Video Out (V.Out)
Off (Off) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–6 (HDMI 1–6),
AV 1–4 (AV 1–4)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Stereo
(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
En 95
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 96
Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an
audio jack of others.
96
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 96
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
97
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
97
En 96
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AUX, AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For
example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–2
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV1” or “AUDIO1” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio
jacks with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV2” or “AUDIO2” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio
jacks with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV3” or “AV4”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a stereo pin cable.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–2, AUDIO 1–2
Settings
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
En 97
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.47) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 98
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder,
and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off) in the selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.47).
■ Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141).
Displays the assignments of the selected scene.
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 98
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the
scene assignments.
98
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 99
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 99
Device Control
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Detail
Input Input source to be used
Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used
Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off
En 99
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.47) for the selected scene.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (DSP Program menu)
En 100
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
DSP Program menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII
Movie), bPLIIx Music*
(bPLII Music*), bPLIIx
Game* (bPLII Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
En 101
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto
, Off
7ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0
to +5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0 to 5
to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off
, On
Item Function Settings
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bPLIIx Music
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off
, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 3
to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to 0
to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 102
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 103
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 32
Manual Setup
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 105
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 105
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 105
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 105
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 106
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 106
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 106
Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 106
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 106
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 107
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 107
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 107
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 108
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 108
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 108
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 109
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 109
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 109
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 109
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 109
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 109
Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 109
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 110
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 111
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 112
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 112
En 104
Network
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 112
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 113
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 113
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 113
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 114
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 114
Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 66
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 114
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 115
Zone2 Set
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 115
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 115
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 115
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 115
Function
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 116
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 116
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 116
Trigger Output
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 116
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 117
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 117
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 117
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 117
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 118
Menu Item Function Page
En 105
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are
possible using the front presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection.
Settings
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
• You can configure the crossover frequency of the speakers whose sizes are set to “Small”. For details, refer
to “Bass Cross Over” (p.106).
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Basic
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Presence speakers, Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
Presence Select this option when you use Presence speakers (p.18).
5ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.83) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone.
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.20).
Front
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components.
Center
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components.
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
En 106
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available in the following cases:
– “Power Amp Assign” is set to anything other than “Basic”.
– “Surround” is set to “None”
– “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”
Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “Presence”.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified
value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz
, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Surround Back
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components.
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Front Presence
Use Select this option when presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.
Subwoofer
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Layout
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front
side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.51) works in this case.
Bass Cross Over
En 107
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m
to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.32). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.32) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
En 108
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–4, AUX, AUDIO 1–2
Settings
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Delay Enable
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto/Manual Select
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
En 109
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms
to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume
is adjusted.
Settings
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Settings
• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
Adjustment
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
En 110
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.122) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.
Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Resolution
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Aspect
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
En 111
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.141).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–2
Default
AUDIO1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Enables/disables ARC (p.142) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
TV Audio Input
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
En 112
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (HDMI) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode
(the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
Amp
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers.
HDMI OUT (TV)
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable (p.28)
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.38).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the
unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device
to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.44).
En 113
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
Settings
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• AirPlay (p.80) and DMC (p.97) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
En 114
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.66).
Settings
■ Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth
devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.113) is set to “Off”.
Off Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
En 115
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “5ch +1ZONE”.
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “5ch +1ZONE”.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.115).
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.86).
Choice
Target: Zone 2
Settings
Zone Rename
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Zone Rename
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
En 116
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”.
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
■ Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or
input switching.
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
HDMI 1–6, AV 1–4, AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Dimmer (Front Display)
Short Message
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Trigger Mode
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone.”
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual.”
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
En 117
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Target Zone
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Off
Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
En 118
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
English English
日本語
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
En 119
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
(When using Wireless Direct)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
vTuner ID vTuner ID
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
SSID The SSID of the wireless network
Security Security method
Security Key Security key
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
En 120
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z
(power).
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press
z
(power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
• Default settings are underlined.
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.121)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.121)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.121)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.121)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume setting for Zone2
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 121
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 121
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
121
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 121
MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 122
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. 122
INIT Restores the default settings. 122
z (power)
PROGRAMSTRAIGHT
En 121
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for
3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for
3 seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 123
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 123
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8
Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
Item Function Page
SP IMP.••8¬MIN
REMOTE ID••ID1
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
TU••••FM50/AM9
TV FORMAT•NTSC
En 122
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MON.CHK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.110) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
MON.CHK••••YES
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
4K MODE•MODE 2
INIT••••CANCEL
En 123
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.120) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
UPDATE•••••USB
VERSION••xx.xx
En 124
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.123).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on
the front display, press z (power) on the front
panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.120). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.123).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PHONO
PARTY HDMI OUT
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
HDMI
AV
5 6
AUX
1234
12
AUDIO
TUNER
34
SUR. DECODE
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
UNIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OOT
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE 2
U
S
B
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
D
V
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
5
6
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
A
U
D
I
O
TUNER
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 125
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.32). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.105).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.109). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.115).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.109). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.115).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.94).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.116) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.117).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.121).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
En 126
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC
wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.19).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.117).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.121).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.19).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC
wall outlet and plug it again.)
En 127
Audio
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.109).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.108).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.32) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.105).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.32) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.107).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.108).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.32) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.106).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
En 128
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.112).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.22).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.111).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.111). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.117).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 129
Video
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-AS710.)
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.122).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.143).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to other
than the HDMI 1–3 jack.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI 1–3 jack (p.23).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.22).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.94).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
En 130
DAB radio (RX-AS710D)
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.54).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.54).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.55).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.58).
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.61), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.61), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service
or may not provide information.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
En 131
Bluetooth
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.114).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection
(p.66).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66).
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.66).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En 132
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.113). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.113).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.73).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.113).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
En 133
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.113).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.123).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 134
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.73).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.67).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.28).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 135
Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.
Ideal speaker layout
12
3
45
6 7
99
ER
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
1 Front speaker (L)
2 Front speaker (R)
3 Center speaker
4 Surround speaker (L)
5 Surround speaker (R)
6 Surround back speaker (L)
7 Surround back speaker (R)
E Presence speaker (L)
R Presence speaker (R)
9 Subwoofer
10° to 30°10° to 30°
En 136
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
En 137
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
En 138
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.
■ Supported devices
❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
•A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.
❑ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
❑ iPod
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of April 2015)
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of July 2015)
En 139
■ File formats
❑ USB/PC (NAS)
* Linear PCM format only
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
File
Sampling
frequency (kHz)
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 —
En 140
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMIHDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEOVIDEO
HDMI
m: Available
HDMI out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/50, 60 Hz mmmm
1080p/24 Hz mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p
720p
1080i
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
VIDEO
in
En 141
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.22) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.47)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external
device operation keys
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DI
S
PLA
Y
RET
U
R
N
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
En 142
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a
digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.23).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the
AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input
assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.47), you also need to change the input assignment for
SCENE (TV).
En 143
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
En 144
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDCP2.2
HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2
(
BD/DVD
)
SURROUND
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
AM
FM
REMOTE
ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP
AC IN
SPEAKERS
WIRELESS
NETWORK
(
NET
)
TRIGGER
OUT
12V
0.1A
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
COAXIAL
CONPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
75
GND
IN
OUT
PHONO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
PR PB Y
(RX-AS710 Europe model)
En 145
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &
DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and
DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
(For RX-AS710D)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance
®
.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.
Trademarks
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 146
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4 (AV 3–4, PHONO, AUX)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AUDIO 1, AV 1)
Coaxial x 2 (AUDIO 2, AV 2)
•Video
Composite x 2 (AV 3–4)
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–6)
•Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
EXTRA SP L/R
*
)
* Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE,
SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI 1–3: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[RX-AS710 U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-AS710 Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-AS710D U.K. and Europe models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-AS710D Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile ................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC
• Wireless Output............................................. Bluetooth Class 2
• Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft)
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Specifications
En 147
• WiFi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
and USB connection
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed
Mode
- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................60 W+60 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................70 W+70 W
Center ............................................................................... 70 W
Surround L/R...........................................................70 W+70 W
Surround Back L/R .................................................70 W+70 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R.......................................................................80 W/ch
Center ..........................................................................80 W/ch
Surround L/R ................................................................80 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .......................................................80 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R .....................................................................130 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .....................................................................125 W/ch
Center.........................................................................125 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................125 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .....................................................................100 W/ch
Center.........................................................................100 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................100 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................100 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).....................................90/110/140/160 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω ............................................. 100 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ............................................60 mV
AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
SUBWOOFER/PRE OUT........................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Impedance .......................................16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
AV 3 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO ...................................................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to Speaker Out (FRONT) (1 kHz, 10 V)
............................................................................ 0.02% or less
AV 3 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 Ω) .............................. 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (Input Shorted 35 mV, Speaker Out [FRONT])
........................................................................... 96 dB or more
AV 3 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted (2V), Speaker Out)
......................................................................... 108 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more
AV 3 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................70 dB/50 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range..............................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step.................................................................................0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut .............................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ................................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut.......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
En 148
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[Canada model]...................................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono................................................................................ 65 dB
Stereo ..............................................................................64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono................................................................................. 0.5%
Stereo ............................................................................... 0.6%
• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM Section (RX-AS710)
• Tuning Range
[Canada model]....................................... 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB Section (RX-AS710D)
• Tuning Range ..........................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Support Audio Format
.......................... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+)
• Antenna .........................................................75 Ω unbalanced
General
• Power Supply
[Canada model].............................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[Canada model] ..............................................................190 W
[Asia and General models] .............................................170 W
[Other models] ................................................................190 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
.........................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off ........................................................0.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired .............................................................................2.0 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi)..............................................................1.9 W
Wireless Direct ..............................................................2.1 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On
(Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ........................................1.8 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
.........................................................................................2.4 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models] .............................................500 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................. 435 x 111 x 377 mm (17-1/8” × 4-3/8” × 14-7/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
................. 435 x 181 x 377 mm (17-1/8” × 7-1/8” × 14-7/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
•Weight
[RX-AS710]......................................................9.2 kg (20.3 lbs)
[RX-AS710D] ...................................................9.2 kg (20.3 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
En 149
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!) 120, 124
Lock icon (o) 117
Numerics
2.1-channel system 16
2ch Stereo 50
4K Ultra HD 143
5.1-channel system 15
7.1-channel system 15
, 18
A
Adaptive DRC 93
ADVANCED SETUP 120
AirPlay 80
AM radio 54
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 142
Audio Decoder (front display information) 91
Auto Power Standby 117
Auto Preset (FM radio) 57
, 65
AUX jack 9
B
Banana plug 19
Bluetooth 66
bookmark 79
C
CINEMA DSP 49
Clear Preset (DAB radio, Option menu) 65
Compressed Music Enhancer 53
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 32
D
DAB information 60
DAB radio listening 58
DAB/FM antenna connection 27
Decoder Off (front display information) 91
Dialogue 93
, 119
Dimmer 116
DLNA 73
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97
DSP Program (front display information) 91
E
ECO 117
Error indication (front display) 134
Extra Bass 94
F
Firmware update 123, 124
FM radio 54
, 62
Frequency step setting 54
, 121
Front display information 91
H
HDCP 23, 129, 137
HDMI output selection 46
HDMI signal compatibility 143
I
Initial Volume 109, 115
Input (front display information) 91
Input Trim 94
Internet radio 77
iPod content playback 67
M
MAC Address Filter 113
Max Volume 109
, 115
Memory Guard 117
Multiple room playback 82
MUTE 46
, 85
N
NAS content playback 73
Network Connection 112
Network information 119
Network Name 114
Network Standby 113
O
Option menu 92
P
Parametric EQ 107
Party mode 86
PHONES jack 9
Power Amp Assign 105
Preset station selection (DAB radio) 59
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 55
, 63
Program Type (DAB) 60
Pure Direct 53
R
Radio Data System tuning 56, 64
Remote control 12
Remote control sensor 9
Remote ID 121
Rename 96
, 99, 114
Repeat 69
, 72, 76
S
SCENE function 47
Selecting an on-screen menu language 31
Setup menu 102
Short Message 116
Shuffle 69
, 72, 76
Signal information 119
Sleep timer 12
Sound program 49
, 50
Speaker impedance 14
Standby indicator (front panel) 9
Standby Through 112
Station preset (DAB radio) 59
Stereo mini jack 21
Stereo mini-plug cable 21
Straight decode 52
Index
En 150
Subwoofer Trim 94
Surround decoder 52
T
Test Tone 108
Tone Control 93
Trigger function 29
U
USB jack 9
USB storage device content playback 70
V
Video/audio input jack combination 24
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 51
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 109
W
Wallpaper 116
Web control 88
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 38
, 112
Wireless Direct 44
, 112
WPS 40
Y
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer) 32
YPAO MIC jack 9
YPAO Volume 93
Z
Zone2 82, 115
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH025A0/EN
Documenttranscriptie
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 6 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 32 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 PREPARATIONS Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 13 PLAYBACK General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 46 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 5 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . 28 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 En 2 Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Preparing the DAB tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Selecting a DAB radio station for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Displaying the DAB information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 CONFIGURATIONS Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 95 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 (DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 118 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 120 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 En Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 3 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 APPENDIX 125 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-AS710.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 DAB radio (RX-AS710D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna (RX-AS710) FM antenna (RX-AS710) *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. DAB/FM antenna (RX-AS710D) YPAO microphone • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-AS710 (Europe model), unless otherwise specified. • In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. Power cable • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure En 5 • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • Bluetooth . p.66 • iPod/iPhone . p.67 • USB . p.70 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.73 • Internet radio . p.77 • AirPlay . p.80 Supports 2- to 7.1-channel speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.32 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.49 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.53 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.82 (multi-zone) Network contents Control iPod/iPhone/ Bluetooth device USB device Speakers Audio Audio HDMI Control 4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.47 TV remote control En 6 . p.141 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.23) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.49) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field even when no surround back speakers are connected. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.22) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.108). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.112). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.94). HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.37) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct VSBS ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.51) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.31). I want to update the firmware... Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.123). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.124). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.95) • SCENE settings (p.98) ❑ Low power consumption (p.117) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.100) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Various function settings (p.103) En 7 • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.119) • System settings (p.120) Useful applications ■ AV CONTROLLER ■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) “AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source. “AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the speaker system. Functions • Power on/off and volume adjustment Functions • Input, scene and sound mode selection • Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices) • DSP Parameter adjustment • Playback control (including music selection for some sources) • For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. • Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations) • Viewing owner’s manual • For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play. En 8 Part names and functions Front panel 1 INPUT 2 ZONE 3 4 5 VOLUME PURE DIRECT INFO (WPS) SCENE PHONES YPAO MIC STRAIGHT PROGRAM BD/DVD TV NET (CONNECT) SILENT CINEMA RADIO AUX AUDIO 5V 1A (RX-AS710 Europe model) 6 789 1 ZONE key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85). 2 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.40). 3 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 4 Front display Displays information (p.10). 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.53). 6 INPUT knob Select an input source. 7 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. : A B C D E 8 Standby indicator F D AUX (AUDIO) jack Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.111) • Standby Through is enabled (p.112) • Network Standby is enabled (p.113) • An iPod is being charged (p.67) For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.26). E USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod (p.67). F VOLUME knob 9 PHONES jack For connecting headphones. 0 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.32). A STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.52). B PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.48). C SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.47). En 9 Adjusts the volume. Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 5 678 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 9: A B C PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE 2 VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR D 1 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.117). 2 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53) is working. 4 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49) is working. 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal (RX-AS710) or an FM radio station (RX-AS710D) signal. 6 Signal strength indicator D F E 7 Bluetooth indicator G E Information display Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.66). 8 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.86) Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.91). F ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.93) is working. 9 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 0 ZONE2 Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.85). A MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. B Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. C VIRTUAL Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.49), or the virtual surround processing (p.51) is working. D Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.37). En 10 G Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker E Presence speaker (L) R Presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer Rear panel 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 (RX-AS710 Europe model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDCP2.2 WIRELESS NETWORK (NET) ARC HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 SPEAKERS OPTICAL REMOTE CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB ANTENNA VIDEO SURROUND (RADIO) Y FM CENTER AC IN EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP (TV) AUDIO 1 FRONT AM IN AV 1 OUT COAXIAL 75 AV 2 ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER ZONE OUT PRE OUT GND AUDIO 2 PHONO AV 3 AV 4 * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 9 8 : B AC 1 AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.26). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.29). 3 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting video/audio signals (p.22). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 4 HDMI 1–6 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.23). 5 Wireless antenna For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.37). 6 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.28). 7 AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.30). D E 9 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.26). 0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.84). A ANTENNA jacks For connecting to radio antennas (p.27). B ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.83). C SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.19). D SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.18). E VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.30). 8 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.23). En 11 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. HDMI 3 1 2 5 6 5 1 AUX 2 MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 NET MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN OPTION H I J ENTER RETURN B C D E F G RADIO POP-UP/MENU 9 : A 3 Input selection keys 4 AV BLUETOOTH 4 3 DISPLAY BAND K Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–6 HDMI 1–6 jacks AUX AUX jack (on the front panel) AV 1–4 AV 1–4 jacks AUDIO AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”) TUNER FM/AM radio (RX-AS710), DAB/FM radio (RX-AS710D) BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) PHONO PHONO jacks 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.85). TUNING Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.47). 6 PROGRAM keys PRESET 7 External device operation keys SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.141). 0 MEMORY ENT External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.141). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.48). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.91). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.55, p.59, p.63). F HDMI OUT key Enables/disables video/audio output from the HDMI OUT jack (p.46). G PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.86). H VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 9 Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.54, p.58). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio (RX-AS710), or DAB and FM (RX-AS710D). PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. MEMORY key 5 SCENE keys Select a sound program (p.48). MODE A Radio keys 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.69). En 12 I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.92). K DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.91). PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.14) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.18) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.22) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.23) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the radio antennas (p.27) Connect the supplied radio antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna (p.28) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 7 Connecting other devices (p.29) Connect a device compatible with the trigger function. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.30) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.31) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.32) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.37) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.17). Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. Function 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Surround back 8 Presence (L) E Presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 Front 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● c*1 ● ● ● ● ● c*1 ● ● ● Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. ● ● Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. ● ● c*2 ● c*2 ● ● ● ● ● ● If you use five speakers in the front side, use two of them as front surround speakers (*1) or presence speakers (*2). We recommend using them as front surround speakers for enjoying unprocessed playback (p.52) or presence speakers for enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (p.49). • For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.135). • If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear left/right sounds, use them as surround back speakers. To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers. • Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. En 14 ● 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) 1 9 6.1-channel system 1 2 3 9 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 7 8 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker. 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) 5.1-channel system E R 1 9 4 1 2 3 9 5 4 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. 2 3 5 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. En 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) 1 1 2 4 9 4.1-channel system 2 5 9 3 4 Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. 5 2.1-channel system • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). 1 Front 5.1-channel system (using presence speakers) E 9 R 1 9 2 2 3 Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Setting the speaker impedance Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.8MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. En 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system. 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. The unit (rear) The unit (rear) 2 SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND (RADIO) M CENTER 2 EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP FRONT SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND (RADIO) M AM CENTER FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP AM SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER PRE OUT PRE OUT Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) E 1 9 2 1 3 9 4 5 6 7 En 18 R 4 2 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6.1-channel system The unit (rear) 2 SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND (RADIO) M CENTER FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP AM ■ Connecting speaker cables ■ Connecting the subwoofer Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Loosen the speaker terminal. SUBWOOFER c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. PRE OUT d Tighten the terminal. + (red) b c FR ON T d a - (black) 1 2 Using a banana plug (Canada, Australia and General models only) 9 a Tighten the speaker terminal. 3 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. 4 5 8 Banana plug a FR ON T b When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). En 19 Audio pin cable ZON E2 SUB WO ZON OFE EO UT PRE OUT R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and ZONE2/F.PRESENCE/SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. The unit (rear) 2 SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND (RADIO) M Caution CENTER FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP AM SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 2 3 9 4 5 • The FRONT jacks and ZONE2/F.PRESENCE/SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks output the same signals. En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDMI cable HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) Digital optical cable OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. Component video cable ❑ COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. Digital coaxial cable COAXIAL • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. AV 2 Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks (Stereo L/R jacks) Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable AV 3 (Stereo mini jack) Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. Stereo mini-plug cable AUDIO En 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit by using HDMI cable, so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. ■ HDMI connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI input HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI HDCP2.2 HDCP ARC HDCP2.2 ARC HDMI HDMI OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 REMO CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB HDMI VIDEO Y IN AV 1 OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack AV 2 (TV) GND O AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 PHONO AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL O TV Audio output (digital optical) • You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.141). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Connecting playback devices ■ Component video connection The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting an iPod (p.67) – Connecting a USB storage device (p.70) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Input jacks on the unit Video Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Audio Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24). Video output (component video) COMPONENT VIDEO CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y PR ■ HDMI connection PR PB Y TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 PR HDCP2.2 ARC OPTICAL AUDIO 1 REMOTE CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB VIDEO Y Y IN AV 1 HDMI 1–6 jacks The unit (rear) PB PB (TV) Y The unit (rear) OUT COAXIAL ZONE AV 2 GND HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDCP2.2 ARC REMOTE ONPONENT VIDEO R PB AUDIO 2 ANTENNA VIDEO SURROUND (RADIO) Y FM AM HDMI output HDMI 75 ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER ZONE OUT PRE OUT GND ONO AV 3 AV 4 ZONE O O O C C OPTICAL COAXIAL IN OUT PHONO AV 1 AV 2 Video device COAXIAL HDMI AV 3 AV 4 AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack HDMI Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Video device If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • If your video device supports HDCP 2.2, connect the device to the HDMI 1–3 jacks. En 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (stereo pin cable). If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Output jacks on video device Audio Composite video Analog stereo Video AV 3-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Video output (composite video) AV 3–4 (VIDEO) jack TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–6 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–6 AV 2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–6 AV 3-4 (AUDIO) Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 3-4 (AUDIO) VIDEO V HD HDCP2.2 ARC HDCP2.2 HDC VIDEO OPTICAL Component video (TV) AUDIO 1 Input jacks on the unit Audio REM CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB VIDEO Y V IN AV 1 OUT COAXIAL GND AUDIO 2 PHONO ❑ Necessary setting Video device AV 2 L AV 3 L For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 4 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. L AV 4 R R R The unit (rear) Video output (component video) AV 3-4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (analog stereo) COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–4, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT PR PR PR HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 PB PB REMOTE Y Y PB HDCP2.2 ARC OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB VIDEO Y Y IN AV 1 OUT COAXIAL AV 2 L GND AUDIO L AUDIO 2 PHONO AV 3 AV 4 R L R AV 4 AV 4 (AUDIO) jacks Video device R Audio output (analog stereo) • If the video output from the video device is something other than 480i/576i, please set the video output to 480i/576i, or connect the video device directly to the TV with a component cable. En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 • The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. 2 Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 5 6 1 2 6 7 Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. 8 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “AV4” (audio input jack to be used). AUX AV BLUETOOTH USB TOP MENU 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET N PHONO HONO POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN 3 4 5 AV 2 DISPLAY ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be used) and press the cursor key (q). En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable audio players to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 3-4 (AUDIO) Turntable (PHONO) PHONO Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. The unit (front) AUX AUX (AUDIO) jack AUDIO Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) AV 1–4 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) O OPTICAL OPTICAL TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A C O HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H COAXIAL HDCP2.2 ARC L OPTICAL COAXIAL (TV) AUDIO 1 REMOTE CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB VIDEO Y Audio device Portable audio player ANTENNA C (RADIO) L FM IN R AV 1 OUT COAXIAL 75 ZONE 2 AV 2 L SUBWO R GND R AUDIO 2 PHONO AV 3 ZONE OUT AV 4 PRE O PHONO If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. L L L R R GND R GND PHONO PHONO jacks Ground lead Turntable • You need to prepare an audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device. Audio output (PHONO) • For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.67) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.70). If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–2 or PHONO, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 Connecting the radio antennas ■ FM/AM antennas (RX-AS710) ■ DAB/FM antenna (RX-AS710D) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna DAB/FM antenna AM antenna The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A The unit (rear) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDCP2.2 WIRELESS NETWORK (NET) ARC OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 REMOTE CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB ANTENNA ANTENNA VIDEO FMDAB/FM Y 75 IN TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDCP2.2 WIRELESS CENTER FRONT AM AV 1 NETWORK OUT COAXIAL (NET) ARC SURROUND (RADIO) (RADIO) OPTICAL 75 AV 2 ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER ZONE OUT PRE OUT (TV) AUDIO 1 REMOTE CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB ANTENNA VIDEO SURROUND (RADIO) Y FM CENTER GND FRONT AM IN AUDIO 2 AV 1 PHONO AV 3 AV 4 OUT COAXIAL 75 ZONE 2 AV 2 SUBWOOFER GND Assembling and connecting the AM antenna • The antenna should be stretched out horizontally. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM antenna. Hold down Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. Preparing the wireless antenna You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight. Connecting the network cable For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.37). Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) WAN S ES WIREL LAN Modem PC Network cable The unit (rear) Router WIRELESS • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. NETWORK (NET) SPEAKERS Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) CENTER FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP • If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network Connection” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.113). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7 Connecting other devices Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a monaural mini-plug cable. TRIGGER OUT jack TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A TRIGGER HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) OUT 12V HDCP2.2 0.1A HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 ARC System connector jack OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB VIDEO Y AV 1 O COAXIAL AV 2 GND AUDIO 2 PHONO The unit (rear) AV 3 AV 4 Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. VOLTAGE SELECTOR 220V 110V 240V 120V - SPEAKERS - The unit (rear) AC IN EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE URROUND BACK / BI-AMP VOLTAGE SELECTOR After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) RK SPEAKERS FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP AC IN To an AC wall outlet En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). RADIO VOLUME ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 En 31 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT • If you want to use the presence speakers for 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) (p.15), set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to "Presence" before starting YPAO. • If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 4 • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If you want to use the surround speakers for the front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.16), set “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu to “Front”. • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. RADIO – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. OPTION Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING ENTER – Keep the room as quiet as possible RETURN – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. – Do not connect headphones. • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. YPAO MIC jack Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 1 • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. 3 The unit (front) YPAO MIC Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT 9 4 9 2 3 YPAO 5 microphone Ear height MIN MAX MIN MAX En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The following screen appears on the TV. 7 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO This completes the preparations. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 5 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 8 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. PRESET MOVIE The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. BAND MODE TUNING To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.35) or “Warning messages” (p.36). • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.93) in the “Option” menu. 9 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.34). 6 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. En 33 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Checking the measurement results Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments You can check the YPAO measurement results. When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 4 1 AUX AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. The following screen appears. RADIO 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.102). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE TUNING 1 Measurement result items PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 2 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10: Internal Error Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.34) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.34) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.44). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.28) or the wireless network connection (p.38). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.38). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.28) or Wireless Direct (p.44). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z Connecting the unit to a wireless network HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 4 AUX AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 Select a connection method according to your environment. 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? Yes 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. A (p.38) SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU No RADIO Does your wireless router (access point) have a WPS button? VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN B (p.40) ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Yes C (p.41) • The checkmark indicates the current setting. DISPLAY BAND ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 38 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. AUX ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO VOLUME The following connection methods are available. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Wireless (WAC) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) USB Cable You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”. Tap here to start setup SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE The name of the unit ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. The network currently selected When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable z HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AUX 1 AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. The unit (front) NE NET RADIO AUX 1 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO AUDIO 5V 2.1A VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and press ENTER. 3 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 40 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. RADIO VOLUME ON SCREEN 8 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. The following connection methods are available. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.38). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.42). Manual Setting You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.42). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.43). 4 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 4 AUX ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. 2 RADIO Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. SCENE BD DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. RADIO The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. 2 POP-UP/MENU 3 ON SCREEN OPTION RETURN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). VOLUME ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 43 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 4 MAIN ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 2 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. SCENE BD DVD 7 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AUX AV 3 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WPA2-PSK (AES) • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. Otherwise, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. TV NET For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. RADIO 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. En 45 PLAYBACK HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 4 AUX AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT Input selection keys Basic playback procedure 1 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MUTE VOLUME 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) (p.54) BAND MODE TUNING • Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) (p.62) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66) SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. • Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) (p.58) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE On-screen input selection Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. ENT L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • Playing back iPod music (p.67) HDMI OUT 1 Output the signals at the HDMI OUT jack. • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70) HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jack. • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.73) • Listening to Internet radio (p.77) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80) 4 VOL. HDMI OUT 1 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu (p.93). En 46 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just one touch. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE Press SCENE. Configuring scene assignments 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. BD DVD TV NET RADIO Input HDMI 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Sound program MOVIE (Sci-Fi) STRAIGHT MUSIC (7ch Stereo) MUSIC (7ch Stereo) Off On On On SCENE Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.46) • Select a sound program (p.48) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53) 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Compressed Music Enhancer 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.97). • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.98) in the “Scene” menu. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 VOL. SET Complete 4 En 47 Selecting the sound mode HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies TV NET MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “DSP Program” menu (p.99). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.52) is automatically selected. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.50). ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback DISPLAY MODE MOVIE b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. RADIO This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.49). PROGRAM a Press ON SCREEN. • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE BD DVD On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.52). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.52). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.53). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.53). En 48 • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.118). ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Hall in Vienna FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. • If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. • When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. En 49 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.51) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. En 50 ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.16) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. En 51 Enjoying unprocessed playback HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. 4 AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ENTER VOL. RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY BAND INFO SLEEP • For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.136). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. VOL. †‡PLƒx MOVIE bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC • Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and the selected decode type (p.100). SUR.DECODE PRESET MOVIE The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR MODE TUNING ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.106) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.51) works when multichannel source is played back. bPLIIx Music bPLII Music bPLIIx Game bPLII Game L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. En 52 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press PURE DIRECT. RADIO MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME PURE DIRECT L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 VOL. PROGRAM Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) “ENHANCER” lights up OPTION • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs ENHANCER VOL. RETURN – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu DISPLAY – Using the multi-zone function BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Enhancer On • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.94) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. En 53 Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. SCENE BD DVD TV NET • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. RADIO Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Setting the frequency steps VOLUME ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT TUNING MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT FM 87.50MHz (Asia and General models only) POP-UP/MENU 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) STEREO TUNED VOL. FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. STRAIGHT 3 PROGRAM Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. TUFM50/AM9 4 5 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 54 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 4 AUX AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV NET • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.57). MUTE 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. PROGRAM Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. TUNER SCENE BD DVD ■ Selecting a preset station VOLUME STEREO TUNED VOL. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.54) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. 01:FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP TUNING ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT STEREO TUNED VOL. Numeric keys MEMORY ENT 01:FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. STEREO TUNED VOL. 02:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered En 55 • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.57). Radio Data System tuning • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.57). 2 Press INFO. When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT ■ Receiving traffic information automatically • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type INFO SBL • To cancel the search, press RETURN. SBR • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name Numeric keys About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. CHARGE OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SLEEP MUTE VOL. TP FM101.30MHz VOL. ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SBR ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SBR Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency En 56 ■ Browse screen Operating the radio on the TV HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 4 AUX 1 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Playback screen RADIO 2 VOLUME 1 TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Preset station list 3 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Menu BAND Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.56), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. Utility 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 57 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient transmission method. VOL. BBCRadio4 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU SBR • If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again. SCENE BD DVD SBL • The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. RADIO • You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.61). • Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/. VOLUME • To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” (p.59) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING BAND • For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.27). You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan. Preparing the DAB tuning PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Selecting a DAB radio station for reception Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial scan. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select the DAB band. The following message appears on the front panel if you have not performed an initial scan yet. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press BAND to select the DAB band. Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station. VOL. DailyService SBL SBR VOL. [ENTER] to Start 3 • “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available. Press ENTER to start an initial scan. • When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”. Secondary station VOL. >>>-------30% VOL. When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order. En 58 BBCNational SBL SBR VOL. • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 4 02:Empty AUX MAIN ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. SCENE BD DVD RADIO ■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press BAND to select the DAB band. VOLUME • You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets OPTION Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING SBR “Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use) AV 3 SBL 1 Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.58) to tune into the desired DAB radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. PRESET Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 MEMORY The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. VOL. Preset:01 SBL SBR • “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. VOL. 01:BBCRadio4 SBL • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65). SBR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. En 59 Displaying the DAB information HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB radio station. 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 2 TV Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE BD DVD Tune into the desired DAB radio station. NET RADIO VOL. PROGRAM MUTE ProgramType VOLUME SBL SBR Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION ENTER RETURN VOL. DISPLAY ClassicMusic BAND MODE TUNING SBL SBR PRESET Information SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 3 Service Label Station name DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) Information on the current station Ensemble Label Ensemble name Program Type Station genre Date And Time Current date and time Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best]) DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station. En 60 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to 100 [best]). AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 2 3 4 RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 1 5 DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING INFO SLEEP 1 2 Frequency Channel label Frequency Channel label 174.928 MHz 5A 208.064 MHz 9D 176.640 MHz 5B 209.936 MHz 10A 178.352 MHz 5C 211.648 MHz 10B Press BAND to select the DAB band. 180.064 MHz 5D 213.360 MHz 10C 181.936 MHz 6A 215.072 MHz 10D Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB channel label. 183.648 MHz 6B 216.928 MHz 11A 185.360 MHz 6C 218.640 MHz 11B 187.072 MHz 6D 220.352 MHz 11C 188.928 MHz 7A 222.064 MHz 11D 190.640 MHz 7B 223.936 MHz 12A 192.352 MHz 7C 225.648 MHz 12B 194.064 MHz 7D 227.360 MHz 12C 195.936 MHz 8A 229.072 MHz 12D BAND VOL. < 5ALevel:80> SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. PRESET MOVIE ■ DAB frequency information SBL SBR ENHANCER PURE DIRECT DAB channel label 3 Reception strength 197.648 MHz 8B 230.784 MHz 13A 199.360 MHz 8C 232.496 MHz 13B 201.072 MHz 8D 234.208 MHz 13C 202.928 MHz 9A 235.776 MHz 13D 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 61 204.640 MHz 9B 237.488 MHz 13E 206.352 MHz 9C 239.200 MHz 13F Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM antenna. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select the FM band. VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU FM 87.50MHz VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 3 OPTION Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. ENTER RETURN Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET STEREO TUNED SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT VOL. TUNING MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT FM 98.50MHz ENHANCER PURE DIRECT L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.94) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. En 62 Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 4 AUX AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.65). SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. RADIO ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ■ Selecting a preset station Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press BAND to select the FM band. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. STEREO TUNED 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.62) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT TUNING MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Numeric keys MEMORY ENT The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. STEREO TUNED VOL. 01:FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. STEREO TUNED VOL. 02:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered En 63 • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65). Radio Data System tuning HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 VOLUME Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.65). ENTER RETURN 2 DISPLAY BAND Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. MODE TUNING PRESET ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 3 SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE SBL SBR Item name 4 About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SBR Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency En 64 • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. ■ Browse screen Operating the radio on the TV HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 4 AUX 1 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Playback screen RADIO 2 VOLUME 1 TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Preset station list 3 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Menu BAND Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (DAB/FM) and frequency. When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.56), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. Utility 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo radio signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. En 65 Playing back music via Bluetooth HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV The unit NET Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. BLUETOOTH SCENE BD DVD RADIO Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) • The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME • To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. • For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138). 2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 3 4 On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. • To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 66 Playing back iPod music HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138). SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Playback of iPod content • The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay (p.80). RADIO You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME Connecting an iPod TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. MODE TUNING PRESET The unit (front) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT NE NET RADIO AUX • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT AUDIO 3 5V 1A 2 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. VOL. Connected L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. En 67 • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.69). ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV 4 NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE 3 5 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 AUX AUDIO ■ Playback screen Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 68 ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 1 4 AUX BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. AV ■ Shuffle/repeat settings Operate your iPod itself to start playback. RADIO • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Item BAND MODE MODE TUNING Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Shuffle (Shuffle) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Repeat (Repeat) 4 En 69 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Playback of USB storage device contents The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. USB You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138). SCENE BD DVD You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Connecting a USB storage device 1 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. OPTION The unit (front) ENTER SCENE AIGHT RETURN PROGRAM BD/DVD TV NET RADIO AUX DISPLAY NNECT) AUDIO 5V 1A BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device VOL. Connected L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. En 70 2 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUX AUDIO Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87). MUSIC 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down En 71 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. External device operation keys PRESET • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. MODE TUNING • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. 4 En 72 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.28). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 73 Playback of PC music contents 3 HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. 4 AUX AV MAIN 3 ZONE 2 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT NET 1 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87). PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. En 74 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV 4 NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 3 5 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 AUX AUDIO ■ Playback screen VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status (such as play/pause). Function 1 Page Up Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS). Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.97). Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 75 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 AUX AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 76 Listening to Internet radio HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. AUX Playback of Internet radio AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT NET • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.28). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. RADIO • This service may be discontinued without notice. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.87). En 77 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT TV 4 NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 3 5 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 AUX AUDIO ■ Playback screen RADIO VOLUME RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 2 List name 2 Playback information Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER 1 Playback indicator 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Playback indicator 4 Item number/total Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79). Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 78 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. 4 AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 3 ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. En 79 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “My__Favorites” folder, select “My__Favorites” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music with AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC (wired or wireless) 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.138). • You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.90). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. En 80 ■ Playback screen • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 2 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. AUX • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. 3 • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.97) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Menu Function Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 81 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2). Preparing Zone2 For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) Living room (Main zone) • Analog audio sources (including radio), and Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 3–4 jacks) of the unit. The party mode (p.86) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type. En 82 ■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier ■ Using an external amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to "5ch +1ZONE" after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) DMI OUT 2 SURROUND (RADIO) M CENTER HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 The unit (rear) ANTENNA ARC SPEAKERS FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP REMOTE PONENT VIDEO AM PB ANTEN VIDEO (RADIO Y FM IN ZONE2 OUT jacks OUT SUBWOOFER 75 ZONE 2 SUBW ZONE OUT PR ZONE 2 L GND PRE OUT AV 3 AV 4 R External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) ZONE OUT 1 9 2 FL FR 3 L R 4 1 5 9 2 AUDIO 3 Zone2 4 5 6 Main zone 7 Zone2 • When using the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, you cannot use the front presence speakers, the surround back speakers or the bi-amp function. En Main zone 83 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks BD/DVD) P2.2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 REMOTE HDMI 5 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks HDCP2.2 IN REMOTE ANTENNA SURROUND (RADIO) FM REMOTE IN/OUT jacks HD IN IN OUT OUT AM IN OUT REMOTE REMOTE OUT 75 ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER ZONE OUT PRE OUT Infrared signal receiver AV 4 Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) The unit (rear) Remote control Infrared signal transmitter Zone2 Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone En 84 z Controlling Zone2 4 HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT AV 3–4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET AUX PHONO 1 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME MUTE VOLUME 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-AS710) (p.54) When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Listening to FM radio (RX-AS710D) (p.62) • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66) • Playing back iPod music (p.67) AV 3–4: AV 3–4 (AUDIO) jacks • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70) TUNER: FM/AM radio (RX-AS710), DAB/FM radio (RX-AS710D) OPTION BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) ENTER RETURN DISPLAY USB: USB jack (on the front panel) BAND SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Listening to Internet radio (p.77) NET: NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) PRESET MOVIE • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.73) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80) MODE TUNING • Listening to DAB radio (RX-AS710D) (p.58) Use the following keys to select an input source. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP AUX: AUX (AUDIO) jack (on the front panel) PHONO: PHONO jacks • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.88) to control Zone2. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume control on it. • The Zone 2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone 2 input with the web control (p.88) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8). • To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input or use the party mode (p.86). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. En 85 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT PARTY SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 En 86 Useful functions HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 AUX Registering favorite items (shortcut) AV BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ZONE 2 3 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT BLUETOOTH USB NET You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be registered. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ENTER DISPLAY BAND MODE PRESET PRESET 1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT STEREO 01:Empty 4 Numeric keys MEMORY VOL. 01:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. TUNED VOL. 3 You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40). • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. Press MEMORY. MUSIC INFO Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET. Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 1 2 STEREO TUNED Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. TUNING Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. ■ Registering an item OPTION RETURN ■ Recalling a registered item – The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the unit. L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR – The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. Shortcut number (flashes) – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2. STEREO TUNED VOL. 02:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 – A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. En 87 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.90) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control (wired or wireless) PC • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.113), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. (wired or wireless) Router The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8). • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.90) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 7.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) En 88 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 4 5 7 2 1 CONTROL 6 1 PLAY INFO Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 STATUS 2 TOP MENU Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SETTINGS 3 SCENE Moves to the settings screen. Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 PARTY MODE 4 POWER Turns on/off the party mode (p.86). Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 SYSTEM POWER 5 VOLUME Turns on/off the power for all zones. Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 MAIN VOLUME 6 RELOAD Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. En 89 ■ Settings screen 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 1 Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 2 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. 3 • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.114) or the name of each zone (p.115). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.112) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.113). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. AirPlay Password Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.80). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.113) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.113). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. Licenses Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit. En 90 Viewing the current status HDMI 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 AUX Switching information on the front display AV BLUETOOTH MAIN 3 USB ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Input source group Bluetooth USB SERVER AirPlay RADIO VOL. PROGRAM MUTE Audio Decoder VOLUME L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) NET RADIO Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) PHONO Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. ENTER VOL. RETURN DISPLAY DISPLAY BAND †‡PLƒx MOVIE MODE TUNING L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Viewing the status information on the TV Information PRESET 1 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. Compressed Music Enhancer status Input source group Item HDMI 1–6 AUX AV 1–4 AUDIO 1–2 Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER (AM/FM) TUNER (DAB) * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.56). See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.60) for details. CINEMA DSP status 2 En 91 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. • Default settings are underlined. VOL. Tone Control L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 93 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 93 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 93 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 93 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 93 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) TV screen Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. En 92 94 94 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 94 Video Processing (Video Process.) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 94 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 94 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 94 FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 94 Init Scan (Init Scan) (RX-AS710D only) Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception. 58 Tune Aid (Tune Aid) (RX-AS710D only) Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label. 61 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (RX-AS710 U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 56 Input Trim Input Settings (In.Trim) (Input Settings) Video Out (V.Out) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Page Item Function Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.69), USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.69), USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76). — Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Page Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Settings ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) On Off Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low Input level Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. On Off Input level ■ Dialogue (Dialog) YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Settings Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. Setting range 0 to 3 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.32). Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.49) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) En 93 ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. Settings Ideal position Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing. Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Configures the input settings. Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Input Trim (In.Trim) Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Video Out (V.Out) Settings Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. Settings Off (Off) ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53). ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.53). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Does not output video. HDMI 1–6 (HDMI 1–6), Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. AV 1–4 (AV 1–4) Default TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) En 94 Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Configuring input sources (Input menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 96 Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 96 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 96 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 97 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 97 • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 95 Page ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Audio In Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Input sources HDMI 1–6, AUX, AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output ■ Setup procedure 1 • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Input sources HDMI 1–6, AV 1–2 ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV1” or “AUDIO1” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. Select “AV2” or “AUDIO2” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Select “AV3” or “AV4”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources HDMI 1–6, AV 1–2, AUDIO 1–2 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 96 Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.47) using the TV screen. Input sources AirPlay Settings Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 97 4 ■ Load Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings 5 6 Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 98 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. 98 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 99 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 99 • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). Detail Displays the assignments of the selected scene. ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off) in the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.47). En 98 Input Input source to be used Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off ■ Rename/Icon Select Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.47) for the selected scene. En 99 4 DSP Program menu items Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Decode Type bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), bPLIIx Selects a surround decoder to be used Game* (bPLII Game*), in combination with the selected sound Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 100 Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. ■ Settings for decoders Item Function Settings Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Reverb Level Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Function 2ch Stereo Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Direct Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Sound program Item Item Settings Auto, Off Neo:6 Music Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 101 4 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. En 102 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Setup menu items Menu Item Function Page Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 32 Selects a speaker system. 105 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 105 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 105 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 105 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 106 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 106 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 106 Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 106 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 106 Auto Setup Power Amp Assign Configuration Speaker Manual Setup Lipsync Sound Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 107 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 107 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 107 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 108 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 108 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 108 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 109 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 109 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 109 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 109 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 109 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 109 Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 109 Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 110 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 111 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 112 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 112 En 103 Menu Network Bluetooth Multi Zone Item Function Page Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 112 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 113 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 113 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 113 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 114 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 114 Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 66 Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 114 Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 115 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 115 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 115 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 115 Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 115 Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 116 Audio Receive Zone2 Set Disconnect Party Mode Set Dimmer (Front Display) Display Set Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 116 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 116 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 116 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 117 Function Trigger Output Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 117 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 117 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 117 Select an on-screen menu language. 118 ECO Language En 104 Speaker (Manual Setup) Front Configures the speaker settings manually. Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings • Default settings are underlined. Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the front presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection. Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components. None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Settings Basic Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Presence speakers, Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection). Presence Select this option when you use Presence speakers (p.18). 5ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.83) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.20). Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). • You can configure the crossover frequency of the speakers whose sizes are set to “Small”. For details, refer to “Bass Cross Over” (p.106). En 105 Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components. None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Surround Back Subwoofer Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Settings Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components. Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components. None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. Surround • This setting is not available in the following cases: – “Power Amp Assign” is set to anything other than “Basic”. Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. – “Surround” is set to “None” Settings – “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front” Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.51) works in this case. Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. Settings Use Select this option when presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected. • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”. Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “Presence”. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. En 106 ■ Distance ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. 1 2 3 Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.32) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 ■ Level Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB Settings Manual 5 Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.32). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. En 107 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone Sound Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Configures the audio output settings. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices HDMI 1–6, AV 1–4, AUX, AUDIO 1–2 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. En 108 ■ Initial Volume Adjustment Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Settings Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. ■ Dynamic Range ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. Settings Settings Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. On Adjusts the effect level automatically. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.49). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). ■ Max Volume Settings Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. ■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). • VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back. En 109 Video Aspect Configures the video output settings. Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.122) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) En 110 HDMI ARC Configures the HDMI settings. Enables/disables ARC (p.142) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.141). Settings Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–2 Default AUDIO1 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 111 ■ Audio Output Network Selects a device to output audio. Configures the network settings. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On Enables the audio output from the speakers. ■ Network Connection HDMI OUT (TV) Selects the network connection method. Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the power saving mode. En 112 Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.28) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.38). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.44). ■ IP Address ■ MAC Address Filter Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. DHCP Filter Select whether to use a DHCP server. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. • AirPlay (p.80) and DMC (p.97) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) En 113 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.66). Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 ■ Bluetooth Standby Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.113) is set to “Off”. En 114 ■ Zone2 Set Multi Zone Configures the Zone2 settings. Configures the multi zone settings. Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “5ch +1ZONE”. Initial Volume ■ Main Zone Set Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Configures the main zone setting. Settings Zone Rename Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.105) is set to “5ch +1ZONE”. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.115). ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.86). Choice Target: Zone 2 • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Settings Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 115 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Function ■ Trigger Output Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone.” An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Source Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Choices HDMI 1–6, AV 1–4, AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB Settings • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”. Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Manual On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. En 116 Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. Target Zone ECO Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. ■ Memory Guard Settings Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. En 117 Language Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) Select an on-screen menu language. You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 118 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Displays information about the current audio signal. Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal MAC Address (Ethernet) Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal MAC Address (Wi-Fi) The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal vTuner ID The speaker terminals from which signals are output Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network Dialogue Output MAC address • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. vTuner ID (When using Wireless Direct) ■ Video Signal SSID Displays information about the current video signal. Security Security method Security key The SSID of the wireless network HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output Security Key HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) IP Address IP address Resolutions of input signal (analog) Subnet Mask Subnet mask MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication Analog Resolution ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV En 119 ■ System Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Displays the system information on the unit. Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.121) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.121) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.121) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.121) System ID System ID number 1 2 Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit STRAIGHT 3 4 5 ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume setting for Zone2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124). Input Set the unit to standby mode. PROGRAM Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. ADVANCED SETUP menu items • Default settings are underlined. En 120 Item Function SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. Page 121 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 121 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 121 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 121 MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 122 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. 122 INIT Restores the default settings. 122 Item Function UPDATE Updates the firmware. 123 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 123 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) Page (Asia and General models only) TU••••FM50/AM9 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. SP IMP.••8¬MIN Settings Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TV FORMAT•NTSC Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL REMOTE ID••ID1 Default Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1, ID2 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3 seconds. En 121 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) 4K MODE•MODE 2 MON.CHK••••YES Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.110) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) MODE 1 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. • When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. Restoring the default settings (INIT) • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”. INIT••••CANCEL Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices En 122 VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Updating the firmware (UPDATE) UPDATE•••••USB New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.124). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) VERSION••xx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.120) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. En 123 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AUX AV 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB MAIN 3 ZONE 2 4 AUDIO TUNER NET PHONO PARTY HDMI OUT Note RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.120). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.123). VOLUME 3 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.123). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 124 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.32). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.105). I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.109). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.115). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.117). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.109). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.115). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.121). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.94). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, En 125 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.117). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.121). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. En 126 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Audio Problem No sound. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.109). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The volume cannot be increased. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.108). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.32) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.105). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.32) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.107). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.108). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.32) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.106). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. En 127 Problem No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.112). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.22). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.111). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.111). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Noise/hum is heard. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.117). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. The sound is distorted. En 128 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.122). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.119). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.143). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2. The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to other than the HDMI 1–3 jack. To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback device to the HDMI 1–3 jack (p.23). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.22). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-AS710.) Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.94). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. En 129 It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Problem Cause Remedy Select the station manually (p.54). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Select the station manually (p.54). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.55). Problem Cause Remedy No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.58). Reception strength of DAB radio is poor. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.61), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. There is no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area. There is multi-path interference. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.61), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not provide information. Contact the DAB broadcaster. No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. DAB radio (RX-AS710D) No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial scan. DAB radio reception is weak or noisy. En 130 Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.114). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.66). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. En 131 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.113). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.113). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.73). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.113). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. En 132 Problem Cause Remedy The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.113). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.123). The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. En 133 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.73). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.67). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.28). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.121). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Unable to play En 134 Ideal speaker layout Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly. E R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 9 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 9 3 Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 1 Front speaker (L) 2 Front speaker (R) 3 Center speaker 6 7 4 Surround speaker (L) 5 Surround speaker (R) 6 Surround back speaker (L) 7 Surround back speaker (R) 0.3 m (1 ft) or more E Presence speaker (L) R Presence speaker (R) 9 Subwoofer En 135 Glossary Audio information DTS-ES ■ Audio decoding format DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. Dolby Digital DTS Express Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital EX DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Neo:6 Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. Dolby Pro Logic II MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. En 136 HDMI and video information Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. WAV Deep Color Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI). ■ Others HDMI A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel x.v.Color This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. Network information SSID SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. En 137 Yamaha technologies Supported devices and file formats CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) ■ Supported devices Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. ❑ Bluetooth device • The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. • A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible, depending on the model. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. ❑ USB devices Compressed Music Enhancer • The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. SILENT CINEMA • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. ❑ iPod Made for. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. (as of July 2015) iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of April 2015) En 138 ■ File formats ❑ USB/PC (NAS) Sampling frequency (kHz) Quantization bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number of channels Gapless playback WAV * 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔ AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 — File * Linear PCM format only • To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. En 139 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out Video device The unit TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI HDMI HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO 480i/576i PR PR PB PB Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO in VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO 480p/576p 720p 1080i VIDEO in 480i/576i m: Available En 140 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.22) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23). For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Volume control including mute 1 2 • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. (Example) ON SCREEN OPTION HDMI Control HDMI Control ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) RETURN DISPLAY c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.47) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys En 141 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. – “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.23). Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.47), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. 5 6 7 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. En 142 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 143 Reference diagram (rear panel) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 WIRELESS HDCP2.2 NETWORK (NET) ARC SPEAKERS OPTICAL (TV) AUDIO 1 REMOTE CONPONENT VIDEO PR PB ANTENNA VIDEO SURROUND (RADIO) Y FM CENTER FRONT EXTRA SP ZONE2 / F.PRESENCE SURROUND BACK / BI-AMP AC IN AM IN AV 1 OUT COAXIAL 75 AV 2 ZONE 2 SUBWOOFER ZONE OUT PRE OUT GND AUDIO 2 PHONO AV 3 AV 4 (RX-AS710 Europe model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. En 144 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. (For RX-AS710D) The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. This receiver supports network connections. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Google Noto Fonts HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association. En 145 Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Explanations regarding GPL This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications Input jacks Other jacks TUNER • Analog Audio • YPAO MIC x 1 • Analog Tuner Audio x 4 (AV 3–4, PHONO, AUX) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 2 (AUDIO 1, AV 1) Coaxial x 2 (AUDIO 2, AV 2) • Video Composite x 2 (AV 3–4) Component x 2 (AV 1–2) • HDMI Input HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–6) [RX-AS710 U.K. and Europe models] • REMOTE IN x 1 FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • REMOTE OUT x 1 [RX-AS710 Other models] • TRIGGER OUT x 1 FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) HDMI [RX-AS710D U.K. and Europe models] • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • Video Format (Repeater Mode) DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [RX-AS710D Australia model] DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER) - VGA USB - 480i/60 Hz • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory USB x 1 (USB2.0) - 576i/50 Hz • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - 480p/60 Hz • Other - 576p/50 Hz Bluetooth Output jacks - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Sink Function • Analog Audio - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, EXTRA SP L/R*) * Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE, SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format • Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device • Bluetooth Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR • Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP - Dolby TrueHD - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - Dolby Digital Plus • Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - Dolby Digital • Wireless Output............................................. Bluetooth Class 2 - Headphone x 1 - DTS-HD Master Audio • Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft) • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - DTS Express Network - DTS • PC Client Function - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible (HDMI 1–3: HDCP 2.2 compatible) • Link Function: CEC supported En 146 • AirPlay supported • Internet Radio • WiFi function • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) • Total Harmonic Distortion - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection Front L/R .......................................................................80 W/ch ............................................................................ 0.02% or less Center ..........................................................................80 W/ch AV 3 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device Surround L/R ................................................................80 W/ch (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 30 W, 8 Ω) .............................. 0.06% or less - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Surround Back L/R .......................................................80 W/ch and USB connection Mode - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................60 W+60 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................70 W+70 W Center ............................................................................... 70 W PHONO to Speaker Out (FRONT) (1 kHz, 10 V) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (Input Shorted 35 mV, Speaker Out [FRONT]) Front L/R .....................................................................130 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) ........................................................................... 96 dB or more AV 3 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted (2V), Speaker Out) ......................................................................... 108 dB or more Front L/R .....................................................................125 W/ch Center.........................................................................125 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch Surround Back L/R .....................................................125 W/ch (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .....................................................................100 W/ch Center.........................................................................100 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................100 W/ch Surround Back L/R .....................................................100 W/ch • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more AV 3 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................................................................70 dB/50 dB or more • Volume Control Range..............................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step.................................................................................0.5 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).....................................90/110/140/160 W • Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut .............................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω ............................................. 100 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal Bass Turnover ................................................................350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut.......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct. PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ............................................60 mV L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. AV 3 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V • Output Level / Output Impedance Video Section Surround L/R...........................................................70 W+70 W SUBWOOFER/PRE OUT........................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ • Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM Surround Back L/R .................................................70 W+70 W ZONE2 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Video Signal Level • Headphone Impedance .......................................16 Ω or more Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component • Frequency Response AV 3 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO ...................................................................... 0±0.5 dB En 147 Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more FM Section • Tuning Range [Canada model]...................................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Power Consumption [Canada model] ..............................................................190 W [Asia and General models] .............................................170 W [Other models] ................................................................190 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off .........................................................................................0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby Off ........................................................0.9 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono................................................................................ 65 dB Stereo .............................................................................. 64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono................................................................................. 0.5% Stereo ............................................................................... 0.6% HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth Standby Off Wired .............................................................................2.0 W Wireless (Wi-Fi)..............................................................1.9 W Wireless Direct ..............................................................2.1 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On • Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ........................................1.8 W AM Section (RX-AS710) Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On • Tuning Range .........................................................................................2.4 W [Canada model]....................................... 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz DAB Section (RX-AS710D) HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] .............................................500 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................. 435 x 111 x 377 mm (17-1/8” × 4-3/8” × 14-7/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Tuning Range ..........................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III) • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright) • Support Audio Format .......................... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+) • Antenna .........................................................75 Ω unbalanced General ................. 435 x 181 x 377 mm (17-1/8” × 7-1/8” × 14-7/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Weight [RX-AS710]......................................................9.2 kg (20.3 lbs) [RX-AS710D] ...................................................9.2 kg (20.3 lbs) • Power Supply [Canada model].............................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz * Specifications are subject to change without notice. [Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz En 148 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 117 Dimmer 116 DLNA 73 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 97 DSP Program (front display information) 120, 124 Numerics 2.1-channel system 2ch Stereo 50 4K Ultra HD 143 5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system ECO 117 Error indication (front display) Extra Bass 94 15 15, 18 Adaptive DRC 93 ADVANCED SETUP 120 AirPlay 80 AM radio 54 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 142 Audio Decoder (front display information) Auto Power Standby 117 Auto Preset (FM radio) 57, 65 AUX jack 9 Firmware update 123, 124 FM radio 54, 62 Frequency step setting 54, 121 Front display information 91 91 I Banana plug 19 Bluetooth 66 bookmark 79 C M CINEMA DSP 49 Clear Preset (DAB radio, Option menu) 65 Compressed Music Enhancer 53 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 32 MAC Address Filter 113 Max Volume 109, 115 Memory Guard 117 Multiple room playback 82 MUTE 46, 85 N 91 91 Option menu 92 NAS content playback 73 Network Connection 112 Network information 119 Network Name 114 En 149 Parametric EQ 107 Party mode 86 PHONES jack 9 Power Amp Assign 105 Preset station selection (DAB radio) 59 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 55, 63 Program Type (DAB) 60 Pure Direct 53 Radio Data System tuning Remote control 12 Remote control sensor 9 Remote ID 121 Rename 96, 99, 114 Repeat 69, 72, 76 HDCP 23, 129, 137 HDMI output selection 46 HDMI signal compatibility 143 Initial Volume 109, 115 Input (front display information) Input Trim 94 Internet radio 77 iPod content playback 67 D O R H B DAB information 60 DAB radio listening 58 DAB/FM antenna connection 27 Decoder Off (front display information) Dialogue 93, 119 134 F A 113 P E 16 Network Standby 91 56, 64 S SCENE function 47 Selecting an on-screen menu language Setup menu 102 Short Message 116 Shuffle 69, 72, 76 Signal information 119 Sleep timer 12 Sound program 49, 50 Speaker impedance 14 Standby indicator (front panel) 9 Standby Through 112 Station preset (DAB radio) 59 Stereo mini jack 21 Stereo mini-plug cable 21 Straight decode 52 31 Subwoofer Trim 94 Surround decoder 52 T Test Tone 108 Tone Control 93 Trigger function 29 U USB jack 9 USB storage device content playback 70 V Video/audio input jack combination 24 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 51 Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 109 W Wallpaper 116 Web control 88 Wireless (Wi-Fi) 38, 112 Wireless Direct 44, 112 WPS 40 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 32 YPAO MIC jack 9 YPAO Volume 93 Z Zone2 82, 115 En 150 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH025A0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
Yamaha RX-S710 de handleiding
- Categorie
- Auto media-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-S710 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-S710 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha RX-S710 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha RX-S710 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha RX-S710 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-S710 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha RX-S710 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha RX-S710 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha RX-S710 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-S710 El kitabı
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha CX-A5200 Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A3080 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V779 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A2070BL Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A870 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A880 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A780 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-S 602 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V500DOwner de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-S601D Handleiding